Samsung | YP-U4QB | Samsung YP-U4QB دليل المستخدم

‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻢ ﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻴّﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻧﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣّﺞ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺐ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ّ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ .FM‬ﺍﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺎءﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ !‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ !‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP٣‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪USB 1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪! MP3‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬّﺮ ﺑـ ‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)‪ّ : Digital Natural Sound engine‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺻﻘﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MP3‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪.Ogg‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ !‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜّﻚ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻭﺧﺴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻚ‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺒﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻬﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻣﺒﻠﻼ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻷﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﺛﺎ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻚ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 85‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪ 60‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ 80‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪2/3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ )ﺍﻵﺫﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) (35) 95‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻮﻓﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ »‪ «Fit to Page‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪“File Browser‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪“File Browser‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪STUDIO‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Samsung Meida Studio‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Samsung Meida Studio‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Meida Studio‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﻠﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ »‪ «L‬ﻟﻸﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ »‪ «R‬ﻟﻸﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،DNSe‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٠‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻘﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻘﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺯﻟﻘﻪ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٢‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،DNSe‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﻣﻴﻐﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺧﻼﻑ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٤‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ƒ ‪USB Connected‬‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪-‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ‪-‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻙ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١.‬ﺍﺯﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ 5‬ﻡ ~ ‪ْ 35‬ﻡ )‪ْ 40‬ﻑ ~ ‪ْ 95‬ﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻁ )ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺑﺘﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺘﻮﺏ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻﺑﺘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻲ ﻟـ >‪ <Auto Power Off‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٦‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻤّﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Samsung Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠّﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ Media Studio‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٦‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Music‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫‪Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ٠٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.٣٠‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ[ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻚ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﻣﺖ ﺑﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺰﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪“FILE BROWSER‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎ ﺕ ﻧﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮ ﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <File Browser‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٨‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪File Browser‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪“FILE BROWSER‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <File Browser‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻠّﺪ >‪.<File Browser‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Delete File‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫‪Music Space.mp3‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun.mp3‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete File‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﻠﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Music‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫)‪Digital Natural Sound Engine (DNSe‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٠‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪) Sound Effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Street Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ >‪ <Off‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<On‬‬
‫>‪) <Clarity‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ >‪.<٢-٠‬‬
‫>‪) <Master EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DNSe‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪،<Studio>، <Normal‬‬
‫>‪,<Concert Hall>, <Dance>, <R&B>, <Club>, <Ballad>, <Jazz>, <Classical>, <Rock‬‬
‫ﻭ >‪ .<User‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <EQ‬ﻭ>‪ <3D & BASS‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ DNSe‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ >‪ .<User‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢‬‬
‫‪ :Play Mode‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫>‪ ،<Repeat One>، <Repeat>، <Normal‬ﻭ>‪.<Shuffle‬‬
‫‪ :Play Speed‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪. .‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ ،<x1.2>، <x1.1>، <x1.0 (Nomal)>، <x0.9>، <x0.8>، <x0.7‬ﺃﻭ >‪<x1.3‬‬
‫)ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪ :Skip Interval‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ < 30 sec>, <10 sec>, <5 sec>, <1 Song‬ﻭ>‪.<1 min‬‬
‫‪) Tag‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ID3 Tag‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ >‪ <Off‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<On‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪ (VBR‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،Ogg‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪ ID3-Tag‬؟‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DNSe‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫>‪ ) <EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ (‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DNSe‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <User‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <EQ‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪.<EQ‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ >‪ <+10 ~ -10‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ ٣ )<3D & BASS‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ (‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺑـ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DNSe‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <User‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <3D & BASS‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪.<3D & BASS‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <3D‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <Bass‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ >‪ <3D‬ﻣﻦ ‪) 0‬ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،4‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ >‪ <Bass‬ﻣﻦ ‪) 0‬ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٢‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <FM Radio‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<FM Radio‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪) Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ >‪ <Manual‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ .<Preset‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto Preset‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫‪ : FM Region‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ‪،<Japan>، <Korea/US‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<Other Countries‬‬
‫‪ : FM Sensitivity‬ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ ،FM‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ >‪ .<FM Sensitivity‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫>‪ <Middle>، <Low‬ﻭ>‪ .<High‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ >‪ ،<High‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ >‪ <FM Region‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ ‪) Korea/US‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻛﻴﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪100kHz‬‬‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.87.5MHz ~ 108.0MHz‬‬
‫ ‪) Japan‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ( ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 100kHz‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.76.0MHz ~ 108.0MHz‬‬‫ ‪) Other Countries‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ( ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 50kHz‬ﺑﻴﻦ ~ ‪87.50MHz‬‬‫‪.108.00MHz‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٤‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﻲ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫>‪ <Auto Preset‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﺰﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺐ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Sound‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Sound‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Volume Limit‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ƒ ‪) Beep Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺐ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺐ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ <Off‬ﻭ>‪.<On‬‬
‫‪ :Volume Limit‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ >‪ <On‬ﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .15‬ﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ ‪ 30‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<Off‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ >‪ ،<Off‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٦‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Display‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Display‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Display Off‬‬
‫‪Screen Saver‬‬
‫‪LED Effect‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ƒ ‪) Display Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪ :‬ﺍﺫ ﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﺮﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ <5 min>، <3 min>، <1 min>، <30 sec>، <15 sec‬ﻭ>‪.<Always On‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Screen Saver‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ >‪ ،<Random‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ >‪ <5min>، <3min>، <1min>، <30sec>، <15sec‬ﻭ>‪ .<Off‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : LED Effect‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪ .LED‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪) <Button> ،<Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ(‪ <Random> ،‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<Always on‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺞﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Language‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Language‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫‪ _ ٢٨‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪ID3 Tag‬‬
(‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬.‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬: Menu
,<
> ,<Italiano>, <Deutsch>, <Français>, <
>, <English>
,<Magyar>, <Русский>, <Español>, <中文(繁體)>, <中文(简体)>
,<Čeština>, <ไทย>, <Svenska>, <Português>, <Polski>, <Nederlands>
,<Español (Sudamérica)>, <Suomi>, <Dansk>, <Norsk>, <Türkçe>, <Ελληνικά>
,<Română>, <Bulgarian>, <Tiếng Việt>, <Indonesia> ,<Português (Brasil)>
.<Slovenský> ‫< ﺃﻭ‬Slovenščina>, <Українська>
‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬.‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‬: ID3-Tag
,<Japanese>, <Italian>, <German>, <French>, <Korean>, <English>
,<Hungarian>, <Russian>, <Spanish>, < Chinese(T) >, < Chinese(S)>
,<Finnish>, <Thai>, <Swedish>, <Portuguese>, <Polish>, <Dutch>
,<Czech>, <Catalan>, <Basque>, <Afrikaans>, <Norwegian>, <Danish>
,<Rumanian>, <Icelandic>, <Hrvatski>, <Greek> ,<Estonian>
.<Vietnamese> ‫< ﺃﻭ‬Turkish>,<Slovene>, <Slovak>
.‫ƒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ ؟‬ID3-Tag ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬،‫ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬MP٣ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ‬
.‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
٢٩ _ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪<Date/Time Set‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Data/Time Set‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ AM/PM‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٣٠‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <System‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<System‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Sleep‬‬
‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Default Set‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ :Sleep‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫>‪ ،<90 min>، <60 min>، <30 min>، <15 min>، <Off‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<120min‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Power Off‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ ،<5 min>، <3 min>، <1 min>، <30 sec>، <15 sec‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<Always On‬‬
‫‪ : Library Update‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Default Set‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ <Yes‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<No‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <No‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Format‬ﻳﺸﻜّﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ >‪ <Yes‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<No‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <No‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : About‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺘﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ >‪ <Firmware Version‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ >‪ <Used‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ >‪ <Available‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ >‪ <Total‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎﺑﻴﺖ = ‪ 1,000,000,000‬ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٣٢‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻜّﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ _ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪Samsung Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪: Media Stuido‬‬
‫• ‪ Pentium 500MHz‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ‪USB Port 2.0‬‬
‫• ‪Windows 2000/XP/Vista‬‬
‫• ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ CD Rom (2X‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫•‬
‫• ‪ Windows Media Player 9.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ 1024 × 768‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ‪ Internet Explorer 6.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ‪ 512MB RAM‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ >‪ .<Media Studio‬ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪<Install now‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٣٥ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪ ،<Media Studio‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺯﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﺡ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪)USB‬‬
‫( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <USB Connected‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ >‪<Media Studio‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﺘﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪USB‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٦‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺰﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﺡ ]‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺄﺫﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪)STUDIO‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Add File‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫>‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪.<Open‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪.<Open‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫>‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪)STUDIO‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺸﺐ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FAT 32‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ‪ Restore device defaults‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻣﺠﻬّﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .Help‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﻟﺴﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Media‬‬
‫‪ ،Studio‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Help> ← <Help> ← <MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻭ®‪Gracenote CDDB‬‬
‫‪.Music Recognition ServiceSM‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ CDDB‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪ .Gracenote‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪Gracenote CDDB‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ”‪ “Powered by Gracenote CDDB‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Gracenote‬‬
‫‪ Music Recogniton Service‬ﻭ‪ MRS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Gracenote‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ! – ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ >‪ <U4> ← <My Computer‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﺘﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺟﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫>‪.<U4‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻮء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) DRM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪ DRM‬؟‬
‫)‪ : DRM (Digital Rights Management‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DRM‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪Safely Remove USB Mass‬‬
‫‪.<Storage Device Drive‬‬
‫‪١1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢2‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ƒ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ – ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﺭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣ Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Music‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ID3‬‬
‫‪ Tag‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ‪) ID3 Tag‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺑـ ]‪.[Unknown‬‬
‫‪) Now Playing‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Artists‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Album‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Songs‬ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Genres‬ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Playlists‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Recently Added‬ﻣﻀﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Recorded Files‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Music Browser‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻫﻲ ‪ MP3، WMA، Ogg‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MP2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪ ID3 Tag‬؟‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٤٢‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ .٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪..‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪ ،(VBR‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﺖ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<Media Studio‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ – ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Media Studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪YP-U٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-U٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪. <Playlists‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <New Playlists‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪<Create Playlists‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻘﺔ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء >‪ <Playlists‬ﻟـ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ _ ٤٤‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﻠﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <My PC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪.<My PC‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪.<Playlists‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪.<My PC‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ >‪.<Playlists‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Playlists‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺠﻠّﺪﺍ ﻓﻤﺠﻠّﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ >‪.<Playlists> ← <Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ 400‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ _ ٤٦‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ" ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete File‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <File Browser‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Add to Playlist‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <Playlist 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ >‪.<Playlist 5‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ >‪<Playlist 1> ← <Playlists> ← <Music‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ >‪ <Playlist 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 400‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )>‪ <Playlist 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ >‪.(<Playlist 5‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Genres‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Recently Added‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Music‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <No File‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٤٧‬ﻭ‪ ٤٤‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ _ ٤٨‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Music‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete All from P...‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ . .٥‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Delete from Playlist‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ ~ ١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Delete All from Playlist‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete All from Play‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Settings‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪<User Button Mode‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪..‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ : Repeat A-B‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DNSe‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Play Speed‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Play Mode‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<Repeat A-B‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ _ ٥٠‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪Repeat A-B‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪) User Button Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <Repeat A-B‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) User Button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <DNSe‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ DNSe‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪← (Normal‬‬
‫)‪← (Studio‬‬
‫)‪← (Classical‬‬
‫)‪← (Jazz‬‬
‫)‪← (Club‬‬
‫)‪← (R&B‬‬
‫)‪(User‬‬
‫)‪← (Concert Hall‬‬
‫)‪← (Rock‬‬
‫)‪← (Ballad‬‬
‫)‪← (Dance‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ )‪Digital Natural Sound Engine (DNSe‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) User Button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <Play Speed‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<NOR (Normal)>، <x1.1>، <x1.2>،<x1.3>، <x0.7>، <x0.8>، <x0.9‬‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ _ ٥٢‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) User Button‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <Play Mode‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪. (Repeat One‬‬
‫)‪(Repeat‬‬
‫)‪(Normal‬‬
‫)‪(Shuffle‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ_ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ .MP3‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ ،FM‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ – ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﺭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <FM Radio‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮ ﺕ‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٥٤‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Manual‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪Searching‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪًﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ _ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟـ ‪ FM‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Manual‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ >‪ <PRESET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Preset‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ >‪ <MANUAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫‪ _ ٥٦‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﻳﺪﻭ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Preset‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ( ﻥ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ >‪.<No‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٢ ~ ١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ _ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playback recorded‬‬
‫?‪file‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <No‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<No‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ >‪.<FM Radio> ← <Recorded Files> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 31‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪) .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‪.( GB 2 ،Kbps 128‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ”‪ .“FM_YYMMDD_XXX.mp3‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “FM‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ،FM‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “YYMMDD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “XXX‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٥٨‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<Media Studio‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ RSS‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ RSS‬؟‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ RSS‬ﺑـ ‪ Rich Site Summary‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Really Simple Syndication‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ‪xml‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ ؟‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺛﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺝ ﻭ‪ UCC‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ – ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ Media Studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ‪. RSS‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Subscribe‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟـ‬
‫>‪ <Datacasts‬ﻓﻲ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ >‪ <URL‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫>►‪.<Next‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪،<Subscribe‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻓﻲ >‪ <URL‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.RSS‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪.<OK‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ Datacasts‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻓﻲ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ _ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <New Group‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟـ‬
‫>‪ <Datacasts‬ﻓﻲ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫>‪.<OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ >‪<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ – ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ Media Studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪..‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪.Datacasts‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٦٠‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ >‪) <Media Studio‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫>‪.<Datacasts> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻓﻲ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻟـ >‪ ،<Media studio‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ _ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﻳﺘﺎﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ! ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ .<Media Studio‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪٥٩~٦١‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪.<Datacasts‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ،Datacast‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <No file‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪My Channel 1‬‬
‫‪My Channel 2‬‬
‫‪My Channel 3‬‬
‫‪My Channel 4‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٦٢‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺿﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Voice REC‬ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ]‬
‫‪Voice REC‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ _ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺻﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playback recorded‬‬
‫?‪file‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Yes‬ﺃﻭ >‪<No‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺮﺏ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<No‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻤﻚ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ƒ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ >‪.<Voice> ← <Recorded Files> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 42‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪) .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ‪.( GB 2 ،Kbps 96‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ”‪ .“VCE_YYMMDD_XXX.mp3‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “VCE‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “YYMMDD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “XXX‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٦٤‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <Display Off‬ﻣﻦ>‪،< Display> ← <Settings‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ _ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ >‪ <Auto Power Off‬ﻣﻦ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫← >‪ ،<System‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٦٦‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <Start‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows Update‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Key Updates‬ﻭ‪ ،Service Packs‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺣﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪) VBR‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﻰ >‪<ID3 Tag> ← <Language> ←<Settings‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻴﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Windows 2000‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Vista‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ _ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
.‫ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬MP3 ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
Music
FM Radio
Datacasts
Voice REC
File Browser
Settings
Music
FM Radio
User Button
Mode
Sound
Display
Language
Date/Time
Set
System
Sound
Effect
Mode
Repeat A-B
Beep
Sound
Display Off
Menu
Date
Sleep
DNSe
Auto Preset
DNSe
Volume
Limit
Screen
Saver
ID3 Tag
Time
Auto Power
Off
Play Mode
FM Region Play Speed
Play Speed
FM
Sensitivity
Play Mode
LED Effect
Library
Update
Default set
Skip
Interval
Format
Tag
About
‫ _ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬٦٨
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 3.7‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪500 mA /‬‬
‫‪ / 300 mAh‬ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 3.7‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪,8Kbps ~ 320 Kbps) MPEG1/2/2.5 Layer 3‬‬
‫‪,48kHz~192kHz) WMA (8kbps~48kbps‬‬
‫‪(Q0~Q10) Ogg ,(8kHz~48kHz‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ×ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ×ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ 1000 :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ 3000 :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ‪20mW (16Ω‬‬
‫‪40Hz~20kHz‬‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪) 20KHz LPF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ‪) 1kHz 0‬ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ‪MP3 :‬‬
‫‪ ،128kbps‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،15 :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫)‪-5~35°C (23~95°F‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ 27.5‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 27 × 83 × 13‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪108.0MHz~87.5‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪55 dB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫‪FM T.H.D‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪1%‬‬
‫‪38dBμ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ _ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO/IEC 13818-3‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‬
.‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
Customer Care Center 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 , 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
0032 (0)2 201 24 18
844 000 844
70 70 19 70
030515 6227-
FRANCE
3260 SAMSUNG ( 0,15/Min),
08 25 08 65 65 ( 0,15/Min)
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0035 (0)2 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
815-56 480
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
0,14/Min)
0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
Country
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Customer Care Center 0 801 801 881 , 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
902 10 11 30
0771-400 200
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-810-5858 , 010-6475 1880
3698-4698
3030 8282 , 1800 110011
0800-112-8888
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232 , 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Web Site
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬LGPL LIBRAIES‫ ﻭ‬GPL EXECUTABLES ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻮﻳﺔ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻛﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺑﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬GPL/LGPL ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
.dmav.sec@samsung.com ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
GPL EXECUTABLES:
- Linux Kernel, Busybox
LGPL LIBRARIES
- uClibc, SDL
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
Preamble
them these terms so they know their rights.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit
to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software
is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom,
not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies
of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of
a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in
effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
and modification follow.
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work,
and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim
or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary
way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there
is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program
under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program
itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not
required to print an announcement.)
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Program (independent of having been These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.
made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and
on what the Program does.
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms,
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
wrote it.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
exchange for a fee.
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on
the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based
notices stating that you changed the files and the date on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
of any change.
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a
complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used
for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution
and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission
to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works.
These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate
your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work
based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives
a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or
modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether
by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the
conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence
you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if
a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution
of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
access to copy from a designated place, then offering distribution of the Program.
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with under any particular circumstance, the balance of the
section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is
the object code.
intended to apply in other circumstances.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
under this License. However, parties who have received copies, the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide
if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised
and/or new versions of the General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version
number of this License, you may choose any version ever
published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving
the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of
the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what
it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what
you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
GNU General Public License for more details.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
You should have received a copy of the GNU General of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Public License along with this program; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Preamble
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author The licenses for most software are designed to take away
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
type `show c’ for details.
the software is free for all its users.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. to some specially designated software packages--typically
Of course, the commands you use may be called something libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors
other than `show w’ and `show c’; they could even be who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) General Public License is the better strategy to use in any
or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the particular case, based on the explanations below.
program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom
of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
in the program `Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you
compilers) written by James Hacker.
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs;
Ty Coon, President of Vice
and that you are informed that you can do these things.
This General Public License does not permit incorporating To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library
or if you modify it.
lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
special circumstances.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need
making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so
that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, nonmust show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that use the Lesser General Public License.
there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients In other cases, permission to use a particular library in nonshould know that what they have is not the original version, free programs enables a greater number of people to use a
so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by large body of free software. For example, permission to use
the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more
problems that might be introduced by others.
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by
protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user
obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified
library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified
version of the Library.
in this license.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between
ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU
a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public
latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or
using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright
The ordinary General Public License therefore permits holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/
or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions
and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work
which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based
on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the library.
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
•b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or
a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed
when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application
does not supply such function or table, the facility still
operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,
application-supplied function or table used by this function
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the program that These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
uses the Library does.
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of
warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution
and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and
this License along with the Library.
thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
exchange for a fee.
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any derivative or collective works based on the Library.
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
of these conditions:
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices
that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary
GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary
GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any
other change in these notices.
header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the
source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant
if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is
itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
from that copy.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
of the Library into a program that is not a library.
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also
combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and
distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to own use and reverse engineering for debugging such
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access modifications.
to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use
parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this
object code.
License. If the work during execution displays copyright
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that
you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange.
Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than
a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore
covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution
of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must
be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if
the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the
Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the
user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified Library. (It
is understood that the user who changes the contents
of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be
able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities. This must be distributed under the
terms of the Sections above.
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the
the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined
computer system, rather than copying library functions
form of the same work.
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as the Library except as expressly provided under this License.
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link
the version that the work was made with.
with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at terminate your rights under this License. However, parties
least three years, to give the same user the materials who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to
modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
Library” must include any data and utility programs needed distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special
exception, the materials to be distributed need not include 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of
means you cannot use both them and the Library together in patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
an executable that you distribute.
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with
these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions
under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
apply in other circumstances.
NO WARRANTY
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
the integrity of the free software distribution system which is THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
implemented by public license practices. Many people have WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
made generous contributions to the wide range of software HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
the original copyright holder who places the Library under this LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE,
in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
this License.
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
SUCH DAMAGES.
Library specifies a version number of this License which applies
to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
not specify a license version number, you may choose any If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms
(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty;
and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a
pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it
does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not, write
to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright
disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library `Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
REV.0.0
Download PDF

advertising